Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

1 .Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. such as duct. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. such as mechanical equipment. Add basic MEP elements. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows. and piping. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. 3 . electrical panels. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. electrical. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and plumbing fixtures. Germany. Add more detailed modelling elements. fixtures. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich.

your Training folder may be in a different location. and sheets to document the project. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. After completing each exercise. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. annotations. So. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Create detail views. For example. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. NOTE Depending on your installation. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. when you add ductwork. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. In this exercise. to provide a richer and more finished design.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Metric: files for users working with metric units. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. is located and accessed in the training files location. views. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. However. however. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. you learn where the training files are located. When you open a training file. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. When you install the training files as instructed. and tags. as well as how to open and save them. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. templates. such as templates and families. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Metric file names have an _m suffix. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. You do not design entire systems. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Create schedules. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. On the Contents tab. For example. you can choose to save your work.

For File name. and click Open. and click Save. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. the Open dialog displays. enter the new file name. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. 8 If you have made changes. you are prompted to save the changes. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.rvt. scroll down. For example. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise.rvt and make changes. verify that Project Files (*. a list of file types displays. and click the Training Files icon. select the folder in which to save the new file. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. if you open settings. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. 3 In the right pane. You may close the file with or without saving changes.rvt) is selected. Accessing Training Files | 5 . For Files of type. double-click Imperial or Metric. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. click ➤ Save As. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. 4 Click the training file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. and you can open any supported file type.

6 .

and schedules required for a building project. schedules. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. 2D and 3D view. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. quantities. In this case. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. ■ ■ 7 . the hierarchy of elements. the operation of the software is parametric. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. hence. the parameter is one of association or connection. As you work in drawing and schedule views. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the door retains this relationship to the partition. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. scope. and phases when you need it. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. You learn the terminology. and plans. drawing sheets. the floor or roof remains connected. In the Revit MEP model. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. sections. drawings. every drawing sheet. If the length of the elevation is changed. If you move the partition. In this case.

Datum elements help to define project context. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. For example. dimensions. and reference planes are datum elements. sprinklers. For example. sinks. tags. tags. and 2D detail components. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. ducts. ducts. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. filled regions. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. and electrical panels. walls and ceilings are hosts. and keynotes are annotation elements. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. boilers. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. They display in relevant views of the design. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. boilers. When you change something. sinks. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. and electrical panels. They help to describe or document the design. Examples include detail lines. sprinklers. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. levels. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. dimensions. grids. For example.

you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. and drawings of the design. you can explicitly control them. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. and so forth). from geometry to construction data. However. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. In other cases. programming is not required. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. and ceilings. Most often. The project file contains all information for the building design. top of wall. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. section views. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. families. and types.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. If you can draw. such as roofs. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. for example. you do nothing to establish these relationships. This information includes components used to design the model. or bottom of foundation. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. In Revit MEP. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Often. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. To place levels. Project: In Revit MEP. elevation views. you must be in a section or elevation view. floors. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. first floor. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. schedules. For example. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. North . By using a single project file.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. views of the project. Understanding the Concepts | 9 .

you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. System families can be transferred between projects. Then experiment with them. For example. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. pipes. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. each in-place family contains only a single type. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Type: Each family can have several types. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. However. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. For example. A type can be a specific size of a family. and wires.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Unlike system and standard component families. showing. or layer the views to see only the one on top. such as a A0 title block. A type can also be a style. hiding. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. and similar graphical representation. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. You can also display several project views at one time. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). System families include ducts. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. identical use. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. With a few clicks. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. For example. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

To return the panel to the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file.

data and systems. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. then select what you want to modify. and for switching views. project and system parameters. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for editing existing elements.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. and settings. When working on the Modify tab.. architect-specific tools. and CAD files. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for running analysis on the current design.. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. select the tool first.

By default. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. closes the application menu (double-click). For example. displays frequently used tools. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. To keep a panel expanded. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. provides requested information. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. provides access to common tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. when adding duct. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.

The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save As) export the current drawing... such as Export and Publish... click. (Export) On the application menu. select a file to open. (Open) save the current drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. select a template and create a new drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.

reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session.. click. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. (Publish) print the current drawing. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. family. but is not enabled by default. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. or template file. publish the current project.. To enable or disable a tool item.. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.. and Walkthrough. (Licensing) close the file. Camera. to. provides views including Default 3D. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation.On the application menu. annotation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . family. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. saves a current project. or template file. (Print) access product and license information. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.

Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. When you are highlighting an element or component. To show the Status Bar again. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. check the Status Bar. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. when you switch to another editing mode. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. workshared components. However. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Starting with the most recent command.To undo or redo a series of operations. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Modify. When you are using a command. displaying the same information. Clipboard. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. or the Family Editor. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. In addition. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. To hide the Status Bar. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. This displays the command history in a list. repeat the command. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Group. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. On the Quick Access toolbar. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. To change existing elements to a different type. When you place an element in a drawing. select one or more elements of the same category. click (Modify).To cancel or exit the current command. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. for example. Place a Wall. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool.

In the following steps. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. click Training Files. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.rvt. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. There are several ways to access zoom options. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For example.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. After you are familiar with these tasks. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.

the view zooms in on the selected area. To modify or add snap increments. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. If you do not have a wheel mouse. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Modifying the View | 19 . NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. click . Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 6 Click in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. this is referred to as a crossing selection. In the drawing area. 9 To display SteeringWheels.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. NOTE As you zoom in and out. When you release the mouse button. on the Navigation bar.

click the SteeringWheels tab. Click and drag to orbit the design. As you move the mouse. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. press ESC. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. moving the wheel to the desired location. and then using the Zoom tool again.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. For more information about SteeringWheels. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 14 To exit the wheel. ➤ Options. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. and click tin the Options dialog. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.

called drag controls. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. After you are familiar with these tasks. display along the ends. as shown. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . These are the drag controls. referred to as shape handles.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. bottoms. Small blue dots.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design. Similar controls. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. and select the duct. 2 Enter ZR. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . and open Level 2 .

All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 6 On the Undo menu. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. click the Undo command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. or press CTRL+Z. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Move. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. In this example. on the Standard toolbar. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. All changes you make to a project are tracked. select the first item in the list. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar.

Some commands. such as Move and Copy. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. you want to move the duct. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and click again to specify the ending position. click to specify the starting position. After selecting the element to move. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . as shown. The duct is moved to the new position. 11 With the duct already selected. for example. and drag it to the left as shown. In this case.

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Return. Click OK. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.Supply. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. For example. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Press ESC twice. 13 To end a command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Select Mechanical . such as the Modify Ducts command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 14 Enter VG.End a command Some commands. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. and open North. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 5 In the New Project dialog. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. you learn how to start a project from a template. 2 In the New Project dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 7 In the Project Browser. and loadable families. Finally.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. click Browse. create and manage views. click Training files. and modify system settings. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. such as ducts and pipes.rte template. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. such as the default project units and settings. under Template file. use copy/monitor. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. and click Open. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. such as coordination review and interference checking. settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 6 Click OK. 27 . system families. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. New projects inherit all the families. In that case. the default building levels and standard views. select Project. and geometry from the starting template. and open Metric ➤ Templates. link files. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. under Create new. You can either select a template from the template library. You can choose from several templates.

and select the Systems-Default_Metric. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select Manchester. 10 Using the same method. NH. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. ■ ■ Under Create new. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Click Cancel. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . (Browse). TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. In the Choose Template dialog. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.rte template and click Open. click Edit. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. you can select it now. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. under Energy Analysis. When you select the material. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Location. For example. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. click Browse. Click OK. click (Browse). select Project template. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. for City.8 In the drawing area. If you want to use a template other than the default. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. navigate to Metric Templates. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. ■ For Building Construction. review the construction materials listed. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK twice. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. create another new project using the Construction template. select School or University. select Level 1. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. for Energy Data.

110. 33 Click OK. under Duct Settings. 110. 140. click Rectangular. and fire protection systems. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. For Categories. 27 Click OK. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 23 In the left pane.00 mm. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. Click OK twice. 24 In the right pane.00 mm. and 310. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . and 140.00 mm. 290. 26 In the right pane.00 mm. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. and demand factors for electrical systems. click Wiring. plumbing. for 90.00 mm.000 mm. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.00 mm.rfa and click Open. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 25 In the left pane. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. under Duct Settings. After standard settings have been established for an organization.00 mm. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. select Views. select Identity Data. click Round. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. wiring. Holding CTRL.00 mm. piping. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. click Sizes. for 90. under Pipe Settings.00 mm. 260. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. for 20. power distribution systems. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 22 In the right pane.

you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. To enable this coordination. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. select Project.rvt. and groups that are contained in a project. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. under Create new. Click Open. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. select Associated Level. click Training. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. select View Name. For Then by. select Auto . you link the architectural model with the MEP model. select Sub-Discipline. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 5 Click OK. under Template file. From the Positioning list. Linking Projects In this exercise. You need to create the MEP model for the project. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. For Then by. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . families. Select Ascending Click OK twice.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. For Sort by. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 38 Close the file.Origin to Origin. 4 In the New Project dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. In addition. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. sheets. select Family and Type. click Browse.

13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 8 If necessary.Mech. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. select the linked architectural model. select Room Bounding.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . under Constraints. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 12 Click OK. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Linking Projects | 31 .

24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 17 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 19 On the left side of the view. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Floor. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. click the level line for 03. click Plan View types.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level.

26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. and click to select the linked model. indicating that a relationship is established. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. If you modify a monitored element. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. and the level 4. a warning message displays.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. indicating that an element has changed. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Linking Projects | 33 . 34 On the Basics tab. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. click Custom. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. appears above the copied elements. and that the copied elements are monitored. After copying. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. level 3. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select Custom. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. 27 In the drawing area. for the link file. highlight the linked model. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. warnings notify you of any violations. click By Host View. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Site. 36 Click OK. Click OK. click Custom. under View Properties. for the link file. select Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. Under Visibility. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. Click OK. click Custom. 3 In the View templates dialog. deselect Parking. Select Show categories from all disciplines. 2 In the New View Template dialog.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. Roads. 5 On the Basics tab. click Edit. and Topography. enter Mechanical View and click OK. deselect Levels. Planting. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. for Name. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. Under Visibility. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . 7 Click OK twice.

Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. click Training Files. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. click Browse.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. Modifying System Settings | 35 . click the Graphics tab. click the Graphics tab. 5 In the New Project dialog. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. selection default options. These settings control the graphics. 8 Click ➤ Options. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. 7 Click OK. 3 Under Colors. 2 In the Options dialog. and click OK. under Template file. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. select Invert background color. notification preferences. journal cleanup options. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. Notice that the drawing area is black. and your username when using worksharing. select Mechanical and click OK. under View Templates. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. they are not saved to project files or template files.rte. 9 In the Options dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

and click OK. For Tooltip assistance. including your default project template. 2 In the Options dialog. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall. select One hour. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. click the File Locations tab. 12 Click the General tab.10 Under Colors. family template files. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. and family libraries. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 11 In the Color dialog. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. 21 Close the file without saving it. 13 Under Notifications. you specify default file locations. the elements causing the error display using this color. 17 Press ESC to end the command. select None. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. When an error occurs. However. 14 Click OK. select yellow. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. click the value for Selection color. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. Specifying File Locations In this exercise.

Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. click Places. and you can create new libraries. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Click and click Browse to select a template. centralized. ➤ New ➤ Project. and Import dialogs.3 Under Default template file. select the folder to save your files to by default. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. click Browse. 4 Click Cancel. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. When you are opening. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. click Browse. under Default path for family template files. 8 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Save. you can start a new project with that template. However. such as in a large. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. click Browse. note the list of library names. 10 In the Places dialog. This path is set automatically during the installation process. You can modify the existing library names and path. Specifying File Locations | 37 . An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. Load. saving. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. TIP To view a template. In the following illustration. 7 In the Options dialog. and click Open. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. or loading a Revit MEP file.

and change the name to My Library. and Import dialogs. and click (Browse). The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 15 Under Library Name.11 In the Places dialog. click (Add Value). click the My Library icon. and click OK twice. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. templates. ➤ Open. and select it as the library path. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. or families. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. Load. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Save. click My Library. and click Open.

26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 21 On the File Locations tab. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 19 Click Cancel. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Places. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. If you work in a large office. 9 In the text editor. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. If you want to relocate this path. 14 Click in the drawing area. such as bump maps. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 22 Select My Library. 3 Under Settings. specify the new location here. click Edit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 20 Click ➤ Options. click the Spelling tab. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. view the current path. 27 Click OK. 23 Click 24 Click OK. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 5 In the text editor. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. custom color files. select Ignore words in uppercase. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This path is determined during installation. click Edit. 2 In the Options dialog. and decal image files. 11 In the Options dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. (Remove Value) to delete the library. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . click OK. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP.

Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 4 In the New Project dialog. 21 Under Personal dictionary.rte. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 23 In the text editor. click the Spelling tab. In this exercise. 24 In the Options dialog. click Browse. click Restore Defaults. you modify snap settings. 19 In the Options dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Training Files. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click Close. you modify snap increments. and enter 500 .17 In the Spelling dialog. click OK. click OK. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 22 In the text editor. work with snapping turned off. 2 In the New Project dialog. 20 Under Settings. click Edit. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click File menu ➤ Save. under Template file. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. under Dimension Snaps. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. You can turn snap settings on and off. As you zoom in and out within a view. 6 In the Snaps dialog. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 18 Click ➤ Options. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 .

click OK. and move the cursor to the right. zoom out until it does so. This is the increment that you added previously. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 8 In the Snaps dialog. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. If it does not. enter SM. such as ZO to zoom out. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. While sketching. For example. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If you do not have a wheel button. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . use the wheel button on your mouse. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. 10 On the Options Bar.7 Under Object Snaps. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. deselect Chain. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. TIP To zoom while sketching.

with or without saving it. and the wall edges. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. and move the cursor to the right. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 22 Move the cursor downward. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and delete the value 500 . Do not set the wall end point. 19 Enter SM. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. the midpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. 25 Click OK. and specify the wall endpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . the command is only active for one click of the mouse.. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 26 Close the file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 .

44 .

duct system and a hydronic piping system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. water source heat pump (WSHP). 45 . you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. After finishing each exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. At the end of the tutorial. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. This system consists of a cooling tower. and then you create a plenum level. you first plan the system. In this lesson. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. By following the recommended workflow. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you will understand the process. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you first configure the linked architectural model. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. In this exercise. After applying a color scheme to the zones. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. As you create the mechanical system. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.autodesk. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. However. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. If the tutorial training files are not present. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you can choose to save your work. methodology. go to http://www.

Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. ceilings. and after the linked model highlights. indicating that it’s the active view. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. Next.rvt. not in the MEP training file. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 6 In the Project Browser.MEP. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . In this section. NOTE When working with a linked file. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. These components are defined in the architectural training file. select Room Bounding. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. under Constraints. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. roof. and double-click West . 1 In the Project Browser. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. you add a level for plenums. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. click to select it. and click OK.

9 On the Draw panel. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. Click Plan View Types. and click OK. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 16 Press Esc. and enter Level 2 Plenum. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. For Offset. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Preparing Spaces | 47 . This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Verify that Make Plan View is selected. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. enter 2600mm. The new level is placed. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and in the Plan View Types dialog. and click Properties. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created.

Under Extents. For Cut plane. for Top. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. Under Identity Data. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. select MEP . In the next exercise. for Default View Template.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Under View Depth. for View Range. enter an Offset of 300mm. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. select Level Above (Level 3). For Sub-Discipline. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Apply Default View Template. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. ■ Click OK twice. 20 In the Project Browser. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. for View Scale. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . select Plenum Plan. right-click Level 2 Plenum. For View Classification. and for Offset. However. enter 0. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. In this exercise.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Edit. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. NOTE After finishing each exercise. select Design. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. and then place spaces in various types of areas. In this exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model. you can choose to save your work.Plenum. for Level.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. For Offset.Space Plan is highlighted. walls. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. select Horizontal. select New. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For (Tag Location). enter 0. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. For Space. For Upper Limit.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. click Training Files. Placing Spaces | 49 . Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Level 2 Plenum. and ceilings).

50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). enter Library. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 9 Select the space.7 Click to place the space. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Name. ensuring coordination between the files. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 14 In the drawing area. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. for Number. enter 219.

Placing Spaces | 51 . select Level 3. For Upper Limit. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 21 Using the method learned previously. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click Modify. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. For Offset.

under Energy Analysis. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 23 Click OK. you place a space in a large corridor area. and then split the space using a space separation line. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

and then press Esc.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. click Training Files. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. and for Offset. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. select Level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 0. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. for Upper Limit. 5 On the Options Bar.

and scroll to the newly placed space. In the schedule. 9 In the schedule. click in the name column. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and change the space number to 216A. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 10 Click in the number column. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.7 In the Project Browser. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and select Corridor. which was numbered 219Q.

and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 11 Close the schedule view. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. as shown.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 15 Press Esc twice.

56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.16 Using the method learned previously. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.

and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. click Training Files. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If necessary.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m.Space Plan is highlighted. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).

enter 0. For Offset. select Interior and Reference. 10 In the plan view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. select Roof Level. click in the chase area to place the space. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 6 Enter VG. select Level 3. right-click. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.4 Press Esc. In the plan view. for Upper Limit. 12 Click in the section view. select the space. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. expand Spaces. On the Options Bar. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. and then click OK. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Element Properties. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. for Upper Limit.

and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. under Loaded Tags. For Number. Bounding elements (such as walls. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . floors. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and click OK. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element.Space Plan. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. enter 1200. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. and maximize the view. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. 17 Type ZF. ceilings. enter 225PC. for Name.■ For Limit Offset. All spaces in the view are tagged. 15 Press Esc. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . enter Chase. Under Identity Data.

The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. In this exercise. To display space reference lines. After a space is placed in an area. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. In the next exercises. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . which removes the space from the Default zone. it is automatically added to the Default zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. under Spaces.Zoning is highlighted. click Training Files.rvt. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. click View ➤ Zones.20 Close the file with or without saving it. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Reference. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building.

and a new zone is created. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ) or 5 In the System Browser. Next. The graphic in the System Browser updates. you assign spaces to a zone. click Reference. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Energy Analysis.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. you assign spaces to zones in the building. double-click 121 Cafeteria. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. click Training Files. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. under Spaces. the Edit Zone tab displays. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. As you do this. and click OK. and verify the zones in the System Browser. indicating that the space is occupiable. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m.Zoning is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. select Occupiable. The Zone tool is active. To display space reference lines. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.

and click Finish Editing Zone. you need to activate the zone visibility. To view the zone in the drawing area.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). and modify the zone properties. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Using the Edit Zone tab. 5 With the drawing area active. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Expand HVAC Zones. and Electrical 220 spaces. select HVAC Zones. Click OK. In the System Browser. Instruction. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 4 In the drawing area. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. you can add or remove a space from the zone. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. type VG. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Instruction 221. select Computer Lab 222.

8 In the Instance Properties dialog.TIP After you finish editing the zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Zoning view to activate it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. enter 2 . click Reference. expand 2 . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. To display space reference lines. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. In this exercise.West .Zoning.rvt. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click Finish Editing Zone.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 9 In the System Browser. under Spaces. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Training Files. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.Zoning is highlighted. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click OK. 11 Close the System Browser. and verify the zone in the System Browser. under Identity Data. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).Area B. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. 5 Click in the Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You activated zone visibility in the views. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. indicating that it’s the active view. for Name. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .West .

select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 8 In the Level 1 .Zoning view. Verify that the distance is 12mm. zoom out. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 15 Press Esc.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. Select Attached End. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning floor plan.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. space. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. on the ViewCube. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. you verify the building.rvt. Front. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. and select 109 Lounge. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. click the corner where the Top. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. and zone information. double-click the zone tag.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. verify that Wireframe is selected. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. and click OK. enter Lounge .East. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. click Training Files.Zoning to make it the active view.Zoning view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 1 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). for Name Value. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 .

select 1_South_Area C. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. ■ ■ On the Details tab. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Using the Highlight tool. click (Isolate). ■ Click (Highlight). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. All spaces in the zone display in isolation.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. With 109 Lounge selected. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. you isolate the space. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. Next.

scroll down in the left pane. select 109 Lounge. For Construction Type.11 °C : 32. This indicates the heating set point. cooling air temperature. verify that 21. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. Below the list of spaces and zones. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. select Lounge/Recreation. and dehumidification set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information.22 °C : N/A is specified. and humidification set point. This indicates the outdoor air per person. For Electrical Loads. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. outdoor air per area. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and then click OK. Below the list of spaces and zones. click . and air changes per hour. Next. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space.22 °C : N/A is specified. click . heating air temperature. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). the zone information displays for the selected zone. verify that 23. For Heating Information. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. Next. the space information displays for the selected space. and then click OK. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. click . and in the People dialog. For People. For Cooling Information. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that <Building> is selected. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. ■ ■ ■ Next. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and in the Space Type Settings dialog.33 °C : 12. click (Shading). Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . This indicates the cooling set point.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. and click OK.

Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. enter 0.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. roofs. open MEP . highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. and other room-bounding components. For Offset. 15 In the Project Browser. click Cancel. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. floors. 12 Using the methods learned previously. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Level 3.

The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Under Energy Analysis. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. select Plenum. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . enter 212P. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. you verified building. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. For Name. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and zone information. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and verify that the space has replaced the void. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Energy Analysis. Click OK. space. and select space Plenum 212P.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. select Plenum. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. for Number. Because this is an unoccupied space. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes.

verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 .rvt. For Ground Plane. and click OK. under Energy Analysis. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. For Location. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. under Volume Computations. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. is selected. verify that 300 is specified. and click OK. verify that Manchester. click in the Value field. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. On the Weather tab. verify that <Building> is specified. Click OK twice. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. for City. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. this option adjusts the times automatically. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click Training Files. For Postal Code. click Edit. verify that Level 1 is selected. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. for Energy Data. 8 In the drawing area. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. If.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click. For Building Construction. For Sliver Space Tolerance. In order to select a space. select School or University. select space Library 219. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Project Phase.Space Plan. On the Place tab. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. enter 03101. and click Element Properties. NH. For Export Complexity. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. for Building Service. you need to select this option.

you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. You have verified the building information. click Edit. Under Power. enter 45 W. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). select Actual. and then click . Select Area per person. click in the Value column. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. select Heated and cooled. or neither. a cooling load. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. For Space Type. Next. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. m. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. Click OK twice. click Edit. NH. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Library . is specified. For Condition Type. verify that Occupiable is selected. select Specified. Select the space associated with the warning. 12 Click the Details tab. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. verify that <Building> is specified.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. and enter 15 sq. for Values. For Latent. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. verify that Manchester. and click OK.Audio Visual. For Building Service. Under Heat Gain (per Person). for Values. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. For Sensible. select Actual. both. for Values. for Values. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . For People. Click OK. verify that School or University is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. For Location. select Specified. and click to learn the cause for the warning. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 60 W. For Building Construction.

21 Click OK. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. click Information). review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. and a loads report displays. space.Space Plan. space. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . You should correct the space error in the building model. or make any changes to the model. select 219 Library.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Calculate. select 219 Library. 16 After you review the loads report. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and can be modified here. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 17 In the loads report. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. 19 In the drawing area. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK.11°C. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. under Energy Analysis. There should be no warnings displayed. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 15 Review the loads report for project. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. or zone information. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. and zone information for the building model. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. weather. In this exercise. and under Heating Information. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.

click Training Files. click to the right of the building to place the legend. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Click OK. in relatively small increments.rvt. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 5 Zoom in to the legend. For Color Scheme. indicating that it’s the active view. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select HVAC Zones. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. 3 In the drawing area.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Expanded Ranges. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. select the color scheme legend. The new scheme displays in the view. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Schemes. select Cooling Load . and click OK.

you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. 11 Using the method learned previously. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. click Training Files. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In the next exercise.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.

for Select available fields from.Space Fill is the active view.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. Click OK. In the Fields dialog. and then click . enter . If you select Show categories from all disciplines. more category options are available. select New Construction. For Type. select Calculated Supply Airflow. enter Space Airflow Schedule. Select Formula. Under Available fields. enter Airflow Delta. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. select Spaces. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. and click OK. for Formula. For Phase. click (Browse). Select Schedule building components. For Name. For Discipline. select Spaces. In the Calculated Value dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. ■ Click Calculated Value. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select HVAC. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select Air Flow. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Formula.

and Blank line. ■ The schedule displays. a view opens that contains the selected space. select Level. click the color swatch. Select Ascending.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. Header. Under Conditions to Use. and then select Hidden field. right-click to access schedule properties. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. select red. For Value. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. select Number. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. and then click Conditional Format. select Not Between. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. For Fields. Click OK twice. select Airflow Delta. select Level. For Then by. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. verify that Show is highlighted. In the Color dialog. and click OK. For Background Color. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it.

the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the next lesson.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In later exercises. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In this exercise. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0.

and work with the airflow schedule. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you modify air terminal parameters. After system creation. Then. After completing the air systems lesson. In this lesson. 79 . learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you will create supply air systems.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. As you place the air terminals. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.

the space crossing lines display. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. click Training Files. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. and scroll to space 223. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the ceiling view.rvt. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.

NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and then select both Copy and Multiple. and then press Esc to end the command. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Placement panel. for Flow. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and press Enter. enter 215 L/s. If the host element is modified or moved.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. click Place on Face. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. type 3600. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. the hosted elements are updated as well. and select M_Supply Diffuser . and press Enter. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 17 Move the cursor down. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. select the diffuser. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Also. The schedule updates with the new flow data. verify that Constrain is cleared.

82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Place on Face. 24 In the Open dialog. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 22 In the drawing area. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. select one of the diffusers. 25 In the drawing area.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 21 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. Next. 28 On the Placement tab. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and click Open. click Yes. clear Leader. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. as shown. As you place the return diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser .Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.rfa. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag.

Level. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 31 In the alert dialog. and click to select the lines. click Yes. and click OK. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. select one of the return diffusers. 32 In the Project Browser. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. select Strong Reference. for Reference. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Other.

Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 40 In the drawing area.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. and then press Esc twice. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. as shown. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 43 Using the same method. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. align the other return diffuser. select the vertical grid line as shown. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . and press Enter. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. 47 Using the same method. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. enter 310 L/s. under Mechanical. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Flow. and on the Options Bar. right-click. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. clear LeftArrow. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling.44 While pressing Ctrl. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. select both return diffusers. As you place the air terminals. and click Element Properties. and click OK.

select M_Supply Diffuser .200 Neck. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. click 1 : 100. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 10 In the drawing area. for Scale. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile.Design to make it the active view. the space crossing lines display. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 .HVAC Plan . click to place the air terminal in the space as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. expand HVAC . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. at the lower left corner of the building. 9 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and double-click Level 1 . Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser.

under Constraints. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. for Flow. 11 Select the diffuser. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. move the cursor down. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. enter 2400. and then press Enter. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. By copying the diffuser. Also. enter 170 L/s. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result. type 6000. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files.Airflow. for Offset. Under Mechanical . Click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. 15 Press Esc.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser.

19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. and then press Esc.16 Using the same method. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . clear Leader. 18 On the Options Bar. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. Next. For Category. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. under Available Fields. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. 26 Using the method learned previously. and press Enter. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 25 Click OK 3 times. double-click System Type. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. click Edit. Type. under Other. enter 210 L/s. type. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. for Sort by. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. select Mark. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 27 In the schedule. tile the windows. 29 Using the same method. under space 115. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. it is a negative value. and click View Properties. mark. and then right-click in the schedule. select Air Terminals. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. for Flow. for Embedded Schedule. Mark. and Flow. select 21.

31 In the drawing area. As you highlight the zone. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. as shown. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and maximize Level 1 . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space.Design.HVAC Plan .The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. 36 In the drawing area.43 W (approximately 1. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.Horizontal .High Efficiency . select M_WSHP . and under Energy Analysis. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 35 In the Type Selector. 33 Click OK.3 times the heating load).32 Open the Instance Properties dialog.7-18 kW . verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.

This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. for Constraints ➤ Offset. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. However. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. click Training Files. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection.rvt.Design is highlighted. including energy analysis. You then create the logical connection between the system components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Systems. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. the space crossing lines display. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. and click OK. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . indicating that it’s the active view. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. As you add diffusers to systems. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. In this exercise. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. enter . 44 Zoom in to space 115. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. When you highlight a space. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. After creating the logical connection. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. right-click the title.HVAC Plan . you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.

select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). and Flow value. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 17 Using the method learned previously. review the Number of Elements. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. System Name. Connect Into. and the system connects them. 15 Click Cancel. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. the number of elements is updated. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 11 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 18 Click OK. 12 In the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. the air terminals are the children. On the Options Bar. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223.

click Training Files. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m.rvt. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. under Identity Data.Rename the system Next. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. In this exercise. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. for Mark. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. for System Name. which updates the name in the System Browser. under Mechanical. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click OK. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 26 Click Finish Editing System. In this exercise. 25 Click OK.

In this case. which provides various layout tools. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. indicating that it’s the active view. For Offset. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. enter 3000. select the upper left diffuser. For Flex Duct Type. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. Select Branch.Design is highlighted. click Settings. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Offset. Also. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type. A Generate Layout tab displays.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.HVAC Plan. for Solution Type. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . the space crossing lines display. select Network. 4 In the drawing area.Round. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. and display solution 1. 5 On the Options Bar. the Network type provides several solutions. For Duct Type. enter 3000. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed.

enter 900. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. Click OK. as shown. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Either relocate the system components. For example.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. or offset elevations are incorrect. as is the elbow itself. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. click Modify. you’ll get an error in a later step. 11 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the duct.

you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . you can verify connectivity as you create a system. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and equipment. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. highlight a segment of the main duct. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. thus it is not part of the system. a disconnection exists. If the entire network does not highlight. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and click to select it. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. and click OK. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. fittings.Flow. Using a flow-based color scheme. The first time you press Tab. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. for Color Scheme. select Duct Color Fill . Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Usually.

and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and then click OK. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Graphics.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). under Mechanical . select one of the diffusers in the system. and on the Options Bar. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. but not all values are used in this view. select By View. 20 In the drawing area. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. select the WSHP. and press Enter. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. for Flow. for Values Displayed. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Airflow.

and then press Esc to clear the selection. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Click OK. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and drag it to the right. highlight a segment of the duct. Select the upper segment of main duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 .21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Under Constraints. select Calculated Size Only. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.65 Pa/m. select Duct Color Fill . Select Restrict Height. and select 400. select the color scheme legend. and then click to select it. click Cancel. for Schemes. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. 26 Click OK. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog.Velocity. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and enter . for Branch Sizing. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. select Friction. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Select Only.

100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.The ductwork and fittings are updated. Using this tool. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Use the information that displays (flow. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. pressure. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. static pressure. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. and pressure loss. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.

remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise.NOTE As you inspect a system. 35 Click Finish. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. also known as the critical path. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

HVAC Plan .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and click Draw Duct. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select the WSHP. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.

10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 On the ViewCube.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . click the corner where the Top. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. select the top right diffuser. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 11 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. Front. for Offset. right-click the connector grip. double-click MEP . 14 In the Project Browser.3D MEP. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . NOTE When drawing duct. enter 3000. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown.

select the top unconnected supply diffuser. in space 115. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 19 In the drawing area. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The ductwork is automatically created.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it is considered a closed loop.

Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. You can ignore the warning. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 24 Select the remaining diffusers. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. 25 Press Esc.22 Using the same method. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.

zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and then click Modify. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 30 Press Esc twice.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.

40 Using the same method. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space.Airflow. such as a plenum. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and then click OK. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. under Mechanical . and click OK. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). under Constraints. clear Restrict Height. and click to select it. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. for Flow. select a segment of the main duct. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

108 .

Create return and supply piping systems. Automatically and manually lay out piping. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you place mechanical equipment. on level 3 of the building model. 109 . you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Then. In this lesson. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. and a cooling tower located on the roof. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. including 2 base mounted pumps. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode.

110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Design is highlighted.Horizontal High Efficiency .HVAC Plan . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.7-18kW . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Left Return . as shown.rvt. in corridor 328.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. and select M_WSHP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.

8 Click the corridor wall face. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. verify that Wall faces is selected. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the dimension. click the top edge of the WSHP. as shown. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. and click to place the dimension. 10 Select the WSHP. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 7 On the Options Bar.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. and enter 600.

(Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. as shown. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.) 14 Click Modify.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. select the 2 WSHPs. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and in the Type Selector. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Click OK.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. for Water Flow. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. as shown. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0.75 L/s. Under Mechanical. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. and click to place it in the mechanical room. enter 2750. 21 Click Modify. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection.

and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. you create the return and supply piping systems. including flow and pressure. analyses cannot be performed. Create the logical connection between the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.22 Close the file with or without saving it. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. but without a corresponding system. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Unlike logical connections (systems). Create pipes to physically connect the system components. You can create pipes to connect system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler.

click Training Files. 5 In the System Browser. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. select the 2 WSHPs. As you assign equipment to systems. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the System Browser.Design is highlighted. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. and click View ➤ Piping. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. right-click the Systems column heading. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. while pressing Ctrl. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.HVAC Plan . IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. indicating that it’s the active view. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . This display indicates that the system is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Creating a Piping System | 115 . They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations.Mech 330). Therefore. where it is easier to review the information. Assigning a system component to an existing system. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.rvt.

9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. Notice that on the Options Bar. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. select the boiler.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. for System Name. 10 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. for System Name. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. You have created the hydronic return system. 12 In the drawing area. and the Edit System tool is not active. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . under Design ➤ HVAC . and bypasses the cooling tower. and click OK. 22 In the Select Connector dialog.Design. 19 In the Project Browser. and select the cooling tower. 23 Close the roof plan view. double-click Roof . 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 25 Select the boiler. Creating a Piping System | 117 . the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. In heating mode. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. In cooling mode. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 26 Click Finish Editing System. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the boiler supplies heated water to the system.

28 Using the same method. and click Column Settings. and click OK. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. you can view several parameters. expand the Hydronic Return system category. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click Select. expand Piping. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Expand All. In the System Browser. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower.8. and click OK.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 In the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. for Water Flow. 29 Right-click CHWS. enter 0. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click Properties. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . under Mechanical. indicating the logical connection. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). You also manually modify the layout path as required. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.

A system preview displays in red. click Check None.Design is highlighted. then the Select a System dialog displays.Mech 330). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . you can place the cursor over a system component.HVAC Plan . and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). 5 In the Filter dialog. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.rvt.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Mechanical Equipment. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). press Tab to highlight the system. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . When you draw a box to select components.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. the boiler. and click to select it. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and click OK. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. indicating that it’s the active view.

11 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Cancel. enter 450. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 10 Click OK. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created.9 In the Select a System dialog. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For Inset. structural beams. duct. select Perimeter. verify that Solutions is selected. It does not reference the architecture. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. click Settings. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. or architectural components. select CHWR. 14 On the Generate Layout tab.

Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. With each Tab. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. the flow for each WSHP is 0. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. 19 In the drawing area.16 Click Finish Layout. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. and press Tab 3 times. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 17 Optionally. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 18 Place the cursor over the piping.75 L/s. to display the path with thinner lines.

24 Press Esc. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 23 Under Mechanical. and access its instance properties. notice that the Water Flow is 1. 22 Select the boiler.50 L/s. under Mechanical. verify that the value for Flow is 1. and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.75 L/s). and click OK. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0.50 L/s. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 27 On the System Tools panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. the Number of Elements is now 8.HVAC Plan .Design. 28 In the Project Browser. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. double-click Level 1 . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Logically. 32 Click Finish Editing System. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. click Edit System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

44 L/s. you physically close the CHWR loop. Next. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. access its instance properties. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. as shown. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.94 L/s. under Mechanical. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. which propagates flow throughout the system. and click Cancel.94 L/s. 35 Using the drag control. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1.50 L/s. 38 Using the same method. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . so the total flow of 6. note that the value for Flow is 4. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.

00%. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). Click Settings. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. enter 450. select a WSHP. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 0. 40 In the Select a System dialog. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. For Slope. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 41 Click OK. For Inset. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . select CHWS. and then click OK.

as shown. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Modify. In a later exercise. 48 While pressing Ctrl. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. (Both sections are at the same elevation.

or offset elevations are incorrect. 50 Using the same method. as shown. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. To create the piping system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components. 51 Click Finish Layout. 52 Close the file with or without saving it.

HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. double-click 3D Building. click Training Files. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. As you work in the training file.rvt. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. as shown. and the return pipes are magenta.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop.Design ➤ 3D Views.

as shown. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 7 In the plan view. 6 Press Delete. select the section of piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. select the boiler. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. 9 In the 3D view. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click to specify the reference point. ■ Click to move the piping. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and press Esc to clear the selection.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. The connections are automatically created. and click Draw Pipe. and click OK. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and the lower one is secondary. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary.11 In the Select Connector dialog. 12 In the 3D view. 13 In the plan view. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. select the boiler. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). select the return pipe riser.

enter 600. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. for Offset. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. and you select 1 connector. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and press Enter. enter 381. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.In a plan view. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor down.

and the appropriate fittings are created. As you place piping runs that are close together. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. select the primary base mounted pump. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 19 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 18 Press Esc twice. and click OK. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 21 In the Select Connector dialog.

26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. right-click the bottom connector. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click to draw the pipe. and select it. as shown. you select the tee fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click the minus symbol.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays. click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right.

for Offset. enter 1200. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. select the primary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the discharge connector. 31 On the Options Bar. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe.28 Press Esc. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. 29 If necessary.

33 Press Esc. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

35 Using the method learned previously. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. as shown. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the bottom control on the tee. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . type 300.■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to create the pipe. enter 2850. for Offset. and press Enter.

You now have a closed loop system. Next. you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. notice that under Mechanical. and click OK. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Cancel. Connect the cooling tower Next. notice that Flow is 6. the value is 0 L/s.44 L/s. as shown. 43 Press Esc. view the properties for the secondary pump. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. select the cooling tower. 44 In the 3D view.50 or 50% of the Flow. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . When you create the pumps in parallel. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe.44 L/s). under Mechanical. right-click. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. In the Instance Properties dialog. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 46 Press Esc. right-click. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . The flow is being propagated through the piping. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. and click Element Properties. for Cooling Water Flow. and click Element Properties.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. under Mechanical. which is rounded up to 3. 48 In the plan view. 42 Click OK.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

49 Press Esc.44 L/s. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and close the dialog. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . 50 In the 3D View. select the cooling tower.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. click Training Files. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. the water bypasses the cooling tower. Adding Valves In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.52 Close the file with or without saving it. When the valve is open. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and is heated by the boiler.

and select M_Ball Valve . 8 Press Esc twice. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. Adding Valves | 145 . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.4 On the Options Bar.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm.

14 Using the same method. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 12 Select M_Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. place another M_Ball Valve . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

19 Using the same method. and click OK. validate that the Flow is 6. Adding Valves | 147 . 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. right-click. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. under Mechanical. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).44 L/s.

50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. and select M_Ball Valve . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.44 L/s. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). and select M_Ball Valve . validate that the Flow is 6.44 L/s. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 22 Using the method you just learned. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. In heating mode. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. 20 Select the bypass valve. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. Initially.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.

5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Size.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. and click OK. select Pipe Color Fill . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Schemes. and click OK. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.HVAC Plan . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. as shown. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.Flow. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. Sizing Pipe | 149 . click Pipe Color Fill .

11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to select the branch. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Select And. and for Velocity. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. for Branch Sizing. select Friction.5 m/s. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and enter 220 Pa/m. Click OK. enter 1.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. select a different layout solution. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). or offset elevations are incorrect. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Under Constraints. Either relocate the system components. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 13 Press Esc. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. or manually modify the pipe.

you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and double-click 3D Building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. pressure. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.rvt. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspecting the System | 151 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Inspecting the System In this exercise. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Using the System Inspector.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. click Training Files. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.

the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. An inspection flag reports the section number. flow. This information helps you modify the system design. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. and pressure information including pressure loss.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. as required.

Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . In this exercise. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. the Static Pressure is 41916. and double-click Level 3 .HVAC Plan . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. targeting those systems that need attention.Design. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. click Training Files. inspect Section 6 again. and click OK.1 Pa. Warnings display. and to size pipe.0 L/s. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 10 Click Finish. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the Pressure Loss is 7160.7. select 32° C.4 Pa. for Fluid Temperature.Note that the Flow is 1. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you need to validate them.rvt. 9 Using the same method. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.

Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. right-click the Systems titlebar. double-click Level 1 . After you assign components to a system. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection.Design. 12 In the System Browser. As you learned when placing components. click Close. expand the Unassigned folder. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. 4 In the System Browser. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. 6 In the Project Browser. thus assigning the components to a system. 9 Right-click CHWS. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. TIP If you have multiple views open. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. the pipe is associated with that system. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. 7 In the System Browser. right-click Hydronic Return. otherwise. For example. If you place components without assigning them to a system. and select Level 3 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design floor plan. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and confirm unassigned system components. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all components to systems. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. and click Show to view all of the system components. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.HVAC Plan . 10 Using the same methods.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. In the System Browser. and click Expand All. and for pipe sizing. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.HVAC Plan . IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. and click View. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors).

13 Right-click CHWR. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . 14 Using the methods that you learned.

156 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 157 .

158 .

Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Wiring . 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. For Temperature. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.04. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. enter 70. select Copper. As you place components and create circuits. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select 90. distribution systems.rvt. ■ ■ For Material. enter THHN. ■ Click New Correction Factor. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .Wire Sizes. select Wiring Types. wiring. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. select Copper. enter 1. click (Open). and demand factors that are applied in the design. Select Correction Factor. For Factor. For Material. speeding up the design phase. You also add a wiring type. click Training Files.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. enter 220. Click Split. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . For Maximum. select 120. By specifying a range. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. For Conduit Type.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. enter 120/240. enter 2000. enter 1. select Hot Conductor Size. select Demand Factors. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. enter 240. For L-L Voltage. select THHN. select 10000 VA. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. select Distribution Systems. enter 50. select 75. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. select 3. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Select Neutral Required. For Wires. select 240. select Single. Under More Than. For Neutral Multiplier. For Insulation. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. For Neutral Size. For Minimum. select Power. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. select Voltage Definitions. For Phase. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. For Max Size. For L-G Voltage. select Steel.0. For Value. enter 240. enter 250.

Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area. Verify that Instance is selected.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). select Electrical. click (Open). restrooms. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Lighting group in the space element properties. such as offices. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. In this case the key style is the type of space and. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. For Type of Parameter. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Spaces. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces.rvt. and conference rooms. click Training Files. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. For Group Parameter Under. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Later in the tutorial. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . and double-click Level 2 . Under Categories.Lighting. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Click OK twice. select Electrical . click Add. under the Electrical . select Illuminance. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

and click OK. under Available Fields. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click Required Lighting Level. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Select Schedule Keys. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. enter Lighting Levels. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. enter Open Office. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. select Spaces. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . enter 485. enter Space Lighting Requirements.Lighting. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. and for Key Name. Click OK.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. Click OK. under Electrical . note the Required Lighting Level parameter. For Name.

the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. which is mapped to project units. select Required Lighting Level.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .Lighting Plan. Notice that as you enter the data. click Edit. for Sorting/Grouping. 22 Using the same method.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. change the sort order back to the default setting. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. Select Blank Line. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties.

Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. that Required Lighting Level is blank. the value input applies only to the selected space. click (Open). select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Later in this exercise. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. under Identity Data. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. for Lighting Levels. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. 27 Click OK. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. In this exercise. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Instruction-Standard. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value.

enter Required Lighting and click OK. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after.00 lx. for Category. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. enter 900. for Title. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add.00 lx. 00 lx still selected. enter 200. for Name. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. select Spaces. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . verify the By Range is selected. and click (Add Value). select Required Lighting Level. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 450. click (Add Value) again. Select the scheme for At Least 20.00. For example. enter Required Lighting Levels. and press Enter. click (Duplicate). Under Schemes.00. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. ■ Click OK.00 lx. For Color. click Training Files. then the new value will be 400 lx. and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 500 lx. and click (Add Value) five times. enter 800. and in the At Least column.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

For Name. 13 Click Calculated Value. Click OK. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Illuminance. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Level 2 . select Spaces. and Required Lighting Level.Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select Required Lighting. Average Estimated Illumination. For Color Scheme. Name. select Spaces. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Discipline. 8 In the drawing area. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. For Type. Level. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. select Electrical. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . double-click Number. enter Lighting Delta. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. for Available Fields.

On the Formatting tab. type a hyphen. for Sort by. Click OK three times. click Browse. select Red. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. for Test. for Formula. under Condition. for Fields. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Click Conditional Format. Click OK. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. Select Header. select Average Estimated Illumination. select Required Lighting Level. select Not Between. select Level. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. and click Browse. Click OK twice. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. for Custom Colors. For Value. Click Background Color. select Lighting Delta. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Blank Line.■ For Formula. press the spacebar.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. First. power circuits. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create a panel schedule. as you place lighting fixtures. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create power loads.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. 171 . Then.

2 In the drawing area. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the Color dialog. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. You can create additional color schemes. click Training Files. 8 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. for the Spaces Category.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m.Lighting CF view is open. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. select Orange. Under Scheme Definition. select the color legend. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. By using orange as the color for this range. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.rvt.Lighting Ceiling plan. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. for Basic Colors. Click OK. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). select Average Estimated Illumination.

The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. zoom to space Library 219.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. which is the lowest value in the specified range. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 13 Click the Level 2 .10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.

verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 19 Press ESC to end the command. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. the fixtures will move accordingly.5 fc range.5 fc range is satisfied. 18 Click to place the fixture. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 20 Select the lighting fixture. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.277V.the +/.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. ■ Under Electrical Loads. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. scroll to view space space Library 219. In the Name dialog. enter 162.00 VA. for Name enter and click OK. for Apparent Load.

junction boxes. Placing Switches. ■ Click Apply. Under Electrical. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.rvt. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. ■ Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics. for Lamp. select 463T5_S. ■ In the Initial Color dialog.93. enter . Click OK. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Under Photometrics. enter F15.85. In the next exercise. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. for Ballast Loss Factor. enter . select T5 [HO]. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. In the Select File dialog. and Receptacles | 183 . click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. you add switches. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ Click OK twice. and receptacles to your design. select Luminous Flux.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select the top center fixture. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. specify 15000. click the value for Initial Intensity. select Xenon and click OK. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. click Training Files.00 lm. for Color Preset. 9 In space Library 219. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. click (Open). 12 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Under Photometrics. and click OK. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. Junction Boxes. Junction Boxes. click the value for Light Loss Factor.ies and click Open. click the value for Initial Color. for Type Mark. Placing Switches.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 7 Click to place the switch. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.277V.

13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. and Receptacles | 185 . 9 Press ESC to end the command.NoLoad.rfa and click Open. The element type M_Junction Boxes . Select M_Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Junction Boxes. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. Placing Switches.

15 Select the junction box.Offset. Under Electrical. enter JB-1NL. Click OK twice. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. zoom to space Library 219. for Level 2 . 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . for Mark.14 Press ESC to end the command. In the Type Properties dialog. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 21 In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. NOTE When entering values. Click Edit Type. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. note the Number of Poles is 1. note that Apparent Load is set to 0.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. enter 2750. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Expand General. right-click and click Column Settings. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Click OK. Select Size. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Space Number. 26 In the System Browser. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. and Number of Elements. 23 In the System Browser. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Distribution System. and Receptacles | 187 . and Voltage. Junction Boxes. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Placing Switches. Space Name.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Electrical. Select Load. 24 For any column. NOTE If necessary. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit.

33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Close the System Browser. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. select Copy and Multiple. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. and Receptacles | 189 . move the cursor along the wall. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .42 Move the cursor down. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 43 Press ESC to end the command.

Placing Switches. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Junction Boxes.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. and Receptacles | 191 .

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and work toward the higher voltage. click (Open). zoom to the space Electrical 220. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .208V MCB . 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 2 In the drawing area. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Adding wiring to a project is optional.Surface: 100A. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.equipment.rvt. click Training Files.

enter PP-2B. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Click OK. 8 Select the panelboard. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.Loads. 9 On the Options Bar. For Panel Name. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. select 120/208 Wye. Click OK. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . select 480/277 Wye. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Distribution System.Loads. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. #1 Pole Breakers. enter 20. enter 20. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. for Max.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. For Panel Name.480V MCB .Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 Select the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 7 Press ESC to end the command. enter LP-2B. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Max. 15 On the Options Bar.

Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . click Check None. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 20 In the drawing area. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 23 In the Filter dialog. zoom to space Instruction 221. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. which is the logical connection between the elements. and for Category.

196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 33 Select the switch on the right. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 32 Press ESC.

38 Press ESC to end the command.35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

45 Close the file with or without saving it. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. for Hot Conductors. and for Category. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits.39 Using the same method. and create permanent wiring. Click OK. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. click (Open). click Check None. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Loads.rvt. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. except without wire. Click OK. select Wires. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 2 In the drawing area. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. enter 2. Next you create circuits without showing wire. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 42 In the Filter dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m.

15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Voltage. Expand Electrical. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Rating. 13 In the System Browser. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Click OK. and verify that Load. right-click on the Systems heading. Distribution System. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. expand Power. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and then expand circuit 1. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. and Voltage Drop are selected. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. under Electrical. 22 With the junction box still selected. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . change the Voltage to 277V. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 30 Close the System Browser. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Click Tags. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices.

select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. under Identity Data. 35 Press ESC to end the command. click below the first one to place it. Click Yes. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. click Edit Type. 40 Click OK twice. for Type Mark. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . enter FR4. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. For Circuit Number. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. select Break. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 47 In the drawing area.

Next you create a switch system. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 52 In the Save As dialog. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. 57 In the Filter dialog. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 54 Select all of the tags. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. and for Category. Click OK. Click OK. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click Save. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. for File Name. click (Open).rvt.rfa. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. and click Apply. enter a comma. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. click Check None. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.

Click OK. under Electrical Lighting. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 12 Select the occupancy sensor.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. enter a. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. for Switch ID. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Creating a Switch System | 205 . Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 2 In the drawing area. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.

Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures.Lighting. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. under Electrical . 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Click OK. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. for switch ID. enter b. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.

click Check None. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.Loads. for Hot Conductors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next you create a circuit and size wire. and data systems. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. 7 In space Electrical 220. and for Category. select the PP-2B panel. and click Element Properties. Click OK. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. 4 In the Filter dialog. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click (Open). 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Circuits are used for power. select Electrical Fixtures. enter 2. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Electrical .rvt. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. lighting. Creating Power Loads | 207 .

click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. and in the right pane. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.rfa. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.13 Select the wire again. and click Open. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select Wiring. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and click to select the circuit. 19 Click OK. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. and in the drawing area. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks.

23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. as shown. click the connector of the first receptacle. select the PP-2B panel. 26 Press Delete. as shown.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 22 In space Electrical 220. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. in space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221.

An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. Next you balance the loads for your design. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220.

This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded.rvt. click Training Files. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Scroll down. for Rating. click Rebalance Loads. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 1-#12. the distribution is shifted. Had there been a greater imbalance. select panel LP-2B. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 3 In the Electrical space. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Finally. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. enter 30A. 6 Click OK. After re-balancing loads. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Click OK. 1-#10. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 2 In the drawing area. click Open. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 1-#12. Under Electrical-Loads. 1-#10. zoom to space Electrical 220. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance.

13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 15 Select panel PP-2B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 14 Close the warning dialog. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. select the transformer TP-2B. and click OK. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 24 Click Select Panel. under Electrical . 12 Select panel PP-2B. 17 Close the warning dialog. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. under Electrical . and click Finish Editing Circuit.Loads. and click OK. enter 25A. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. enter 40A. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. for Rating. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog.Loads. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Rating.

Under Header Text. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. Under Header Text. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. for Font. click (Open). enter 4 mm. enter 5 mm. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. select Bold and Italic. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. Select PP-2B. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Click OK. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet.rvt. expand Sheets (all). Under Body Text. for Font Size. click Training Files. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. under Other. for Font Size. for Appearance. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. and open E601 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. The Panel Schedule Report displays. 5 In the Project Browser. click Edit. 4 Close the report. 10 Click OK twice. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select Berlin Sans FB.Panel Schedules. 6 In the Project Browser.

Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. In the System Browser. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit.rvt. select space Lounge 212. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Expand Unassigned. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. each with a load of 180VA. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. click (Open). Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. click Training Files. press TAB once. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212.

20 On the Options Bar. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. select MDP-1. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. for Panel. Checking Your Design | 215 . under Warnings. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. In the System Browser. 15 In the dialog. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 In the drawing area. 16 Close the details dialog. zoom to space Electrical 214. 18 Select panel LP-2C.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

click Training Files. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Vent. Adding a pipe size.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate.Sanitary. In this lesson. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and click Properties. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. 4 In the Name dialog. planning is critical to a successful design. 219 .rvt.Plumbing Plan . In this exercise. and click OK. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. and verify that Level 1 . type PVC .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in addition to loading existing families. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. you create a PVC pipe type. right-click PVC . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

6 Click OK.DWV.DWV: Standard. under Pipe Types. 21 In the right pane. and click Main.PVC . 27 For the new pipe size. click Training Files. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.5 In the Type Properties dialog. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. select Plastic. 13 In the right panel.DWV: Standard.293 mm. 17 In the left pane. click Modify. select Sanitary. In the Project Browser. 18 For System Type. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. and click OK. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . 26 Click OK. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. click Pipe Settings. Tap. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . and open Metric\M_Trap P . 22 Click New Size.rfa. Cross. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 24 For Inside Diameter. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. Tee. enter 45.PVC . under Mechanical. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select None. for Material. 10 On the Selection panel. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.000 mm. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. For Offset. select M_Tee Sanitary . enter 10°. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.Sch 40 . 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Tee.Vent is listed. enter -1250. 25 For Outside.Sch 40 . select Branch. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 15 For System Type. PVC . select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.006 mm.PVC . enter 46. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. enter 54. for Nominal.Sch 40 . 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Sanitary.

sanitary piping. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. vent. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and hot and cold water piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the sanitary plumbing system. including plumbing fixtures. Create the hot water system. 221 . add a hot water heater. Create the cold water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

a toilet. 16 In the Select a System dialog. select one of the components in the system. The base is placed. and click OK. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . as shown. for example. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. at the midpoint of the detail lines. A preview of the piping layout displays. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Sanitary 107. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view.

select Main. 28 On the Options Bar. 25 In the left pane. for Solution Type. 23 For Pipe Type.Sanitary. for Diameter. 26 For Pipe Type. and for Offset. enter 1. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 21 On Options Bar. enter -350 mm. select 100 mm. for Slope. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work.05%. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. select Intersections. You accept this suggested solution. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 29 On the Options Bar. select PVC . The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select PVC . 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and modify it to meet project requirements.19 On the Options Bar.Sanitary. 30 Click Modify. The default settings are automatically modified. and click Settings. select Branch. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. and click OK. click Solutions. enter -350 mm. 27 For Offset. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 24 For Offset. enter -1225. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout.

Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 34 Click Modify. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.33 In the 3D view.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .36 Using the previous method. 37 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

Overall. When a fitting is reversed. select the fitting and click to reorient it. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing .

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. adding sinks in the men’s room.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . you continue with the work from the last exercise. and check the slope control. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. as shown. 5 On the Placement panel. in the Type Selector. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Rectangular. 4 On the Element panel.Plumbing Plan . and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Public. select 560 mmx560 mm . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. under M_Lavatory .rvt. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line.2. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.7 Click Modify. 8 Select the sink. select Multiple. On the Options Bar. and press Enter to create a second sink. enter 711.

14 On the Edit Piping System panel. enter 711. and press Enter to create the third sink. 15 Click the 3 sinks. click Add To System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system.2. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 11 In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Press Esc.

double-click 3D Plumbing .Overall. click Finish Editing System. as shown. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. under Design ➤ Plumbing .16 On the Edit System panel.Design ➤ 3D Views. 20 Select the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 21 Select the tee. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. In the System Browser. 19 In the 3D view. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.

press Spacebar. 26 On the Options Bar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink.05%. enter 760 mm.22 In the plan view. 24 On the Options Bar. enter 1. When you press the Spacebar. for Offset. 27 Click Modify. and click to draw the pipe. and click Apply. with the tee fitting selected. for Slope. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option.

and when the vertical center line displays. 30 In the 3D view.Sch 40 .PVC .DWV. 32 Select the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 31 Click Modify. click to place the fitting. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 29 In the Type Selector. move the cursor over the stub pipe. select Standard. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.

on the Options Bar. 36 In the section view. In the next steps. right-click the right connector. and press Enter. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 150 mm. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. enter 305 mm. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 34 Press Esc. you add pipe segments to the double wye.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. double-click the section head to open the section view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 37 Select the fitting.

■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). as shown. 42 Click Modify. 40 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and click to place the pipe. 41 Using the same method.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.

Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 49 Using the same method. 46 In the section view. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 48 Click Modify. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and click Draw Pipe.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. enter 150 mm. press Spacebar. 47 Move the cursor down. right-click the bottom connector. and press Esc.

55 In the 3D view. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.PVC . 56 Using the same method. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.DWV.Sch 40 .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 53 Using the same method. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. select Standard. under M_Trap P . 52 In the plan view. 54 Click Modify. 51 In the Type Selector. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. select the P-Trap on the left.

enter 150 mm. Click Modify. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. select the left P-Trap.. Click in the plan view. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and press Enter. connect the right sink to the double wye. Select the double wye pipe on the left. In the plan view. 58 Using the same method. Move the cursor to the left.

select PVC Sanitary. and select a proposed solution. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . On the Routing Solutions panel. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. under Pipe Types. while pressing Ctrl. while pressing Ctrl.■ In the 3D view. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. In the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Press Esc.

61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. verify that 1. click Training Files. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. for Slope. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. adjusting the sanitary stack. In the left pane of the Open dialog.05% is selected. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. and verify the slope. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Finish. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m.rvt. 62 On the Options Bar.

4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . select Standard. 3 In the Section view.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Modify.Sch 40 . 5 Select the tee. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Plumbing Plan . as shown. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . right-click the top connector. and click to draw the pipe. 10 In the 3D view. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. select the elbow fitting on the right. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 9 In the Type Selector. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .DWV.Design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Floor level line. select the vertical stack.Design. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Overall. 7 On the Selection panel. and click Draw Pipe.PVC .

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .43 In the 3D view. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. After finishing each exercise. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.autodesk. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. In this lesson.rvt.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. If the tutorial training files are not present. 2 Right-click Standard. However. 267 . A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. click Training Files. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In this tutorial. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You create a new pipe type. you can choose to save your work. go to http://www. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.

select Fire Protection Wet. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). However. 9 Click OK. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. structural beams. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. In the left pane. For Offset. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. select Main. select Carbon Steel. For Offset. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. In this exercise. you create project parameters and work with schedules. verify that 2800 is specified. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and click Properties. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. for Material. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. 6 In the Project Browser. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. select Fire Protection Wet. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. and then click OK. click Rename. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Next. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. or architectural components. In the next exercise. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. under Mechanical. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. For Pipe Type. you modify the type properties of the pipe. and enter Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. verify that 2800 is selected. For Pipe Type. duct. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. For System Type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.

right-click. for Name. click Training Files. select the upper half of the building. click Add. enter Sprinkler Zone. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. and then click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. and click Element Properties. for Sprinkler Zone. the space crossing lines display. select space Instruction 221 as shown. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 6 In the drawing area. When you highlight a space using the cursor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Fire Protection. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 8 Using a crossing window. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. select Spaces. 5 Click OK twice.rvt. For Group parameter under.Fire Protection Piping Plan . under Fire Protection. enter Zone 1. Under Categories. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 13 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. for Sprinkler Zone. including a calculated value parameter. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. enter Zone 2. to which you add various parameters. and then click OK. verify that only Spaces are selected. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. and click OK. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Sprinkler Zone. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Zone 1. and then access instance properties. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 10 In the Filter dialog. under Fire Protection. and then click OK. under Fire Protection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m.

select Length.Design is highlighted. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. select mm. For Rounding. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Units. and click Field Format. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . enter Maximum Spacing. Click OK. Obstructed-Combustible. double-click on each column separator. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. select Millimeters. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Using the same method. Select Schedule keys. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select Fire Protection. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Click OK. The schedule displays. enter Protection Area Construction Type. For Key name. For Group parameter under. 14 Select the new header. For Unit symbol. 11 Click OK twice. For Type of Parameter. enter Light. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click the Formatting tab. and on the ribbon. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. select Spaces. 7 Click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . For Name. select 0 decimal places. 9 On the Formatting tab. for Name. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 10 In the Format dialog. click Add Parameter.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Maximum Spacing.

Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Unobstructed Extra. select Spaces. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter 40. and press Enter. enter Sprinkler Schedule. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. For Name. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. enter 4575. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Unobstructed Ordinary. Click OK. 16 Using the same method.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category.

The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . For Units. In the Fields dialog. select Common. For Discipline.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Enter the formula operator / after Area. Click OK. select Area. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Fixed. enter Minimum Sprinklers. select 0 decimal place. For Type. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Number. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. and click OK. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Formula. 22 Click OK twice. click . 19 Click the Formatting tab. and click Field Format. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For Rounding. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. under Available fields.

under Other. and then click Field Format. select Level. select Number. for Sort by. select Hidden field. and select Totals only. select Sprinkler Zone. and click View Properties. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Fields. Select Header and Blank line. select Level. For Then by (second instance). select Minimum Sprinklers.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Header and Blank line. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Use default settings is selected. and then select Hidden field. For Then by. select Sprinkler Zone. For Fields. At the bottom of the dialog. ■ In the Format dialog. Under Field formatting. for Sorting/Grouping. select Grand totals. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. click Edit. 26 Click OK 3 times.

For Category. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. System Name. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Fields. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Embedded Schedule. and click View Properties. On the Formatting tab. double-click Type. for Filter by. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 30 Click OK twice. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. click Edit. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Sprinklers.27 In the drawing area. under Other. for Filter. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and select Totals only. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. for Embedded Schedule. Under Field formatting. delete the word Maximum. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. and click View Properties. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Level equals Level 2. click Edit. for Available fields. select Count. select Grand totals. and Count. right-click the schedule.

48 In the floor plan. 44 In the schedule. As a result. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. Unobstructed. Unobstructed. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. Unobstructed. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. select Ordinary. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. The parameter change is evident in the schedule.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 43 Click Cancel. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. select space 221 Instruction. but their values are not determined. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 52 Click OK. under Identity Data. and click OK. and the spacing parameter values are evident. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. and access the instance properties. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. under Identity Data. select Light. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. select space 221 Instruction. select Ordinary. 41 In the plan view. double-click FP . you are actually editing information in a database of building information.Fire Protection Plan Design. for Protection Area Construction Type. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 50 Access the instance properties. 46 With the space still selected.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. click Training Files. As you place the sprinklers.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you can choose to save your work. At the end of this tutorial. go to http://www.autodesk. After finishing each exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. However. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. By following the recommended workflow. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. As you create the system. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. If the tutorial training files are not present. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. methodology. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. and double-click Level 2 . hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will understand the process. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 279 .

IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. When there is a small misalignment. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. After placing the initial sprinkler. 3 In the Project Browser. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. When this happens. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. and click to place 3 sprinklers. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and 207. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. verify that Constrain is cleared. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 10 Press Esc twice. Also. as shown. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 In the drawing area. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. select the sprinklers that you placed. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 9 In space Instruction 202. 206. while pressing Ctrl. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205.

Fire Protection Piping Plan . you place non-hosted sprinklers. 17 In the Project Browser. and 200C). Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 16 Close the ceiling plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc. 200B. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. as shown. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. open Design ➤ FP . specify a vertical offset.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Next. 18 Type WT. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.Design. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule.

you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). for Offset. 25 Click OK. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined.19 In the floor plan. and press Enter. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Notice that the schedule updates. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. enter 11.0. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. In the next exercise. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . and click Element Properties. enter 2900 mm. you adjust the offset. and with piping (physical connection).FP_Ceiling view. After creating the logical connection. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. enter 4100. This number is determined in the schedule. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. under Constraints. Next. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. For Number. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. move the cursor to the right. 29 Press Esc. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . In this exercise.

Design is highlighted. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Fire Protection Plan . This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. as shown. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . As you assign sprinklers to systems. However. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 1 In the Project Browser.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. and select Piping. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. click View ➤ Systems. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Unlike logical connections (systems). indicating that it’s the active view. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.rvt. 5 Right-click the header. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building.

select an initial piping layout. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Creating a Piping System | 285 . indicating the logical connection. In the System Browser. press Tab. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. within the Piping Systems folder. and click Select. Next. and select the system. 11 With the system still selected. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. place the cursor over a sprinkler. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. named Fire Protection Wet. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet .

24 On the Generate Layout panel. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 23 For Offset. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected.0 is specified. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 13 In the System Browser. for System Name. system equipment. When the layout is finished. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. as shown. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 15 In the drawing area. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. In the left pane. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for Diameter. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -3650. For Pipe Type. For Offset. 19 Click OK. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 22 On the Options Bar. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. select Branch. verify that 2800. and number of elements in the system. and on the Options Bar. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. and a piping layout preview displays. enter FP Wet_Zone2. providing system editing tools. click Settings. select 150 mm. click Place Base. click Solutions. 12 On the Options Bar.Wet is selected. 14 Click Finish Editing System.The Edit Piping System panel displays. verify that Main is selected. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions.

the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. and select solution 4. A (parallel movement control) displays. In general. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. and green represents branch lines). Creating a Piping System | 287 . First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. verify that Network is selected. On the Generate Layout panel. click Modify. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run.

Either relocate the system components. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. select a different layout solution. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 32 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . or that offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . as shown. 29 Click Finish Layout. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. the Connect Into tool.Design is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. and select the elbow fitting as shown. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and then you create piping to physically connect them. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and various manual pipe creation tools. 2 Zoom in. 3 If necessary. indicating that it’s the active view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. Next.33 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Fire Protection Piping Plan . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.

and pipe or duct is created. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Finish Editing System. or a system component to display system tools. 5 In the drawing area. air terminals. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. mechanical equipment. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 9 On the Edit System panel. click Add To System. you can select the pipe or duct. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. radiators. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers).4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 8 In the corridor. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser.

Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 14 Close the System Browser. 23 View the result in the 3D view. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 13 Click Finish Layout. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 12 On the Options Bar. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 21 In the Piping Plan. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. and then tile the views. and select solution 5. verify that Network is selected. 20 Open Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. for Solution Type.11 On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Solutions is selected. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers.

and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe.24 In the Piping Plan. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 28 In the drawing area. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and click Draw Pipe. 27 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. 29 Using the same method. right-click. for Offset. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. select 2800. 25 Select the sprinkler.

Fire Protection Piping Plan . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . 4 On the Options Bar. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. for Scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 31 In the plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 33 Close the file with or without saving it. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. Because the whole system highlights.rvt. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. select 1 : 50. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.

Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 8 Right-click. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and click View Properties. double-click on the section head to open the section view.6 Press Esc.

and click Draw Pipe.Design. right-click Design ➤ FP . Click OK. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. For Default View Template. Under Identity Data. and click Apply Default View Template.Design the active view. for Sub-Discipline. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 22 In the drawing area. 14 Select the tee fitting. and then right-click the top connector.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. select FP . For View Classification. and then click Modify. 19 Make Level 2 .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and press Enter. 15 Press Spacebar. select Design.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. drag the top section boundary line up. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. select MEP Section. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. enter 2135. enter FP Section_Stair. 13 Select the elbow fitting. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Fire Protection Plan . 17 Move the cursor up. 10 In the Project Browser. for View Name. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 12 If necessary.

select . 27 On the Placement Tools panel.23 In the section view. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet. and click Draw Pipe. and then click Modify. verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps).Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. for Diameter. 26 On the Options Bar. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

click Yes to load a family. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. and click Open. 32 In the Open dialog. and then click Modify. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet.50 mm is selected. as shown. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm.rfa.29 Close the section view. 31 In the alert dialog. 33 In the Type Selector. verify that M_Gate Valve .

Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. click Training Files. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ 3D Views. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers.rvt. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . for Diameter. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). select Pipe Fittings and Pipes.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. 8 Click Modify. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. or width. height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. width. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. 6 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. 4 In the floor plan view. click Check None. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. width. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. or height. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Changing the diameter. select 25mm. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 7 On the Options Bar.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. and click Open. 12 If necessary. and after each segment highlights. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. Press Esc. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 18 In the 3D view. . The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. By hiding the linked file. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. click to place the tag.rfa. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 17 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. select the linked architectural file. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. Clear Leader.

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . select 100mm. and when the section highlights. for Diameter. 21 On the Options Bar. press Tab. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

The pipe diameter is modified. 23 Close the 3D view. 25 On the Options Bar. and maximize the floor plan. as shown. and then tag the piping as shown. 24 In the drawing area. 26 Using the same method. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter. select 40mm.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.

27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You added tags to pipes. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. In this tutorial. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. you created a wet fire protection system. In this exercise. For additional practice.

304 .

305 . create details. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

306 .

you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. If the view included detail graphics. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. matchlines. 2 In the Project Browser. and view references. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 307 . click Training Files. dependent views.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. under Floor Plans. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and apply a view template. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.

and click OK. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 4 Using the same method. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. create dependent views for areas B and C. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 6 In the Project Browser. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. more focused. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and click OK. 7 Close the file without saving. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. click Training Files. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. 10 In the drawing area. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. views and put them on the sheet. as shown. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and click Apply Default View Template. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then press Esc.rvt. and click Rename.

click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. Click OK. select Double Dash . In the Color dialog. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. For Line Weight. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select 11. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Line Pattern. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 19 In the drawing area. click the current value. 13 Press Esc twice. select black. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . and then press Esc.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. and click OK.

for Target view. on the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 21 Using the same method. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 25 Using the same method.20 Select the upper view reference and. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . as shown.

enter Plumbing Isometric . right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and zoom to each of the view references. 27 Using the same method. select Plumbing Isometric. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. click Training Files. right-click 3D Plumbing. and click Properties. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Zoom in.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. For Default View Template. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.rvt. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and select the section box. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.Domestic Water. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. for View Name. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 .

■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and then click OK. select Dash. Click OK. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. for View Classification. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 6 In the Project Browser. The section crop lines no longer display. For Sub-Discipline. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Documentation. For Pattern. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. and click to select it. The selected piping displays as a dashed line.Domestic Water. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. select 3. 10 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Apply Default View Template. select Plumbing. Click Apply.

12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click to select it. 13 Using the same method. press Tab 3 times.

15 Right-click.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown). 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

and in the view properties. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. For Slope. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. and for Default View Template. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. specify Plumbing .Isometric.Sanitary Waste. verify that Common is selected. 19 Using methods learned previously. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. select 1. On the View Control Bar.16 Press Esc. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline.5mm Arial. and in the Type Selector. click on the Format value.

and then place the callout view on a sheet. 22 Click OK twice.rvt. as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. click Training Files. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.■ In the Format dialog. and click to place the spot slope annotation. When the view is associated with a sheet. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . indicating that it’s the active view. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. select To the nearest 10. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. for Rounding. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. 26 Press Esc twice. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you use a plan view to create a callout view.

Creating Callout Views | 317 . select 1 : 50. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 5 On the Options Bar. for Scale. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary.

10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. and select the viewport. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. under Sheets (all). drag it to the sheet. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. using the same method. for Line Weight. 13 In the Project Browser. Click OK.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select 5.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. double-click M601 . Expand the Callout Boundary category and.

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. For Title on Sheet. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. for View Name. right-click the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Click OK. Creating Callout Views | 319 . enter WSHP PART PLAN. 17 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template. and click Apply Default View Template.

and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.

under Names. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. Creating Callout Views | 321 .Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename. and click OK. enter Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view. 26 In the Rename View dialog.

322 .

click Training Files.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. work with model-based components. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. Creating Annotations In this exercise.rvt. and annotation to create a legend. as shown. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. duct tags. 323 . symbols. linetypes. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans.

5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 8 With the text still selected. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1. 9 Press Esc twice. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.

verify that Leader is cleared. as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. a segment of round duct.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. and then click Right Straight. select a supply diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. a return diffuser. and a segment of rectangular duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Creating Annotations | 325 .

move diffuser tags off the ductwork. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. for Ducts. and click OK.17 Click Modify. and click Open. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. under Category. as shown. 22 In the Tags dialog. 20 In the Tags dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. click Load.rfa. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 25 In the drawing area. 21 In the Load Family dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. clear Leader. If necessary. you can annotate the element with a second tag type.

Creating Annotations | 327 . 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.26 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. and then press Esc. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. select Horizontal. 32 In the drawing area. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Leader. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. and Attached End. 31 On the Options Bar. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.

35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. select Free End. 36 Press Esc twice. as shown.33 On the Options Bar. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Leader.

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. and click OK. lay out. That’s because you changed a type property. click Training Files. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Dimensions | 329 . 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. and all elements of that type are affected. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 37 In the drawing area.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. for Leader Arrowhead.rvt. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. not simply an instance property. and lock lighting fixtures. 40 Using the method learned previously. indicating that it’s the active view. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. select the last tag placed. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

12 Click EQ. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and then select the interior face of the wall. On the Options Bar. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 13 Press Esc. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. select the dimension line. 14 Using the same method. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.

click Training Files. 20 Using the same methods. annotation symbols. and offset them from the wall. 17 Press Esc. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. Creating a Legend In this exercise. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Creating a Legend | 331 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. and press Enter.9). linework. Because the dimensions are locked. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. click the 3 interior locks on the line.rvt. enter 2430. and notes. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.200 Neck. For Scale. select 1 : 50.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. and select 1. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. For View.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Floor Plan.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . Click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . enter Diffuser Legend. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 10 Using the same method. click below the title to place the diffuser.

click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.11 Press Esc. and select 1. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Creating a Legend | 333 . 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.DROP and its text note.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 21 Press Esc. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and then press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 24 Select the component’s break line.RISE symbol for the copy start point. The selected detail lines are now thin. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc.

enter E. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.30 Select Spot Elevation . Creating a Legend | 335 .MECHANICAL LEGEND. and then click Modify. 34 Using the method learned previously. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and then click Modify. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.

41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. and select Title w Line .No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

and text. detail groups. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Detailing 15 In this lesson. indicating that it’s the active view. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .113 East elevation view.rvt. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. 337 . Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. A drafting view using detail components. A detail callout that references another view.

select each of the 2 panelboards.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . clear Leader. and click to place it. 5 In the drawing area.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.113 East on the sheet. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Next. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . place Power Riser .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 4 On the Options Bar. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. and then modify and align the views. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 8 Using the same method.

under Identity Data. giving the appearance of a single view. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click Activate View. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. right-click. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.9 Press Esc. and click Deactivate View. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . for Title on Sheet. 13 Right-click. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. select the 113 North view. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area.

as shown. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 22 Press Esc.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Title w Line . 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you add wiring to the diagram. right-click. 21 Using the drag control. select the 113 East elevation view. right-click.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. In the next exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and click Activate View. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view.

and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you draw. notice that there are no snaps active. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click OK. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. In the New Subcategory dialog. 2 Close the Project Browser. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. In the Line Styles dialog. verify that Chain is selected. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. Under Modify Subcategories. enter Electrical Power. 8 On the Options Bar. for Name.rvt. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. expand Lines. click New. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. select 6. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. for Line Weight.113 North view.

11 Using the same method. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 3mm. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .10 Press Esc. as shown. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).

16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. TIP When you use the Trim tool. so that the result is as shown. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.

select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 While pressing Ctrl. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. and select 1. 29 Click Modify. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 28 Click above the cap. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 33 On the Options Bar. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. select Multiple. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 36 Press Esc.

enter 3. 40 Press Esc. Press Esc. and then press Esc. You enter exact values for each line length. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. you can ensure that they stay together. enter 12. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. click on the length dimension value. change the length of the bottom line to 3. 42 On the Options Bar.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. for Offset.0. enter 7. Using the same method. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. and press Enter. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and press Enter. 39 Move the cursor to the right.

53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and then press Esc. for Name. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. select all 3 lines. enter Ground. while pressing Ctrl. 54 Select the group. 47 In the drawing area. 46 In the Project Browser. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 52 Select the detail group. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 50 With the group selected. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and click OK. 51 Using the method learned previously. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.

Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and will place it on sheet E01. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. In later exercises.

2 Zoom in to view the section. click Training Files. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. Walkthroughs. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and then press Esc. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the section box. and click Apply View Template.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. select 3D Views. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 8 On the ViewCube. and then click the corner where the Top. and click Rename. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC .rvt. 6 In the Rename View dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. Back. click Home. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and double click Typical Make Up Air.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. 4 In the Project Browser. and Left sides converge. for Name. 5 Right-click the copy. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. and click to specify the second leader point. 15 Using the same method. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). select 3D HVAC Iso. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Typical. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Move the cursor down and to the left. Click OK.■ ■ Under Names.

22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail.18 Press Esc. To rotate and reposition a text label. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 23 Click on the crop region. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. under Extents. and then click OK. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. and under Extents. as shown. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. select Crop Region Visible. 19 Complete the text labels.

25 Click OK. and click OK. Place a detail component. and under Extents. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 29 Right click the view. select Crop View and Section Box. click Training Files. clear Crop Region Visible. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . 32 In the Instance Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click View Properties. and click Deactivate View. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and click Activate View.rvt. 30 On the View Control Bar. 33 Right-click the view. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. scroll down. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet.

By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 3 In the Project Browser. For Scale. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select Plumbing. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. click the point at the top of the drain. as shown. and click Properties.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. Click OK. Click OK. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 13 In the drawing area. 9 Zoom in to the component. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. right-click the view name. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. as the rectangle start point. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. for Sub-Discipline. select Documentation. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. 12 On the Element panel. select 1 : 5. For View Classification.

I. 22 Click Modify. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 20 Select 1. 18 With the filled region still selected. 21 In the drawing area. select C. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. for Type.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140.P.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . Concrete. and then press Esc.

28 Click Modify. select Multiple. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click to select them. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 31 On the Options Bar. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Press Esc. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. (Line).Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. and then click point 6 as the endpoint.

and then press Esc. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 40 Click Finish Region. and then select the side of the slab above the line. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew.

. press Tab to highlight the chain. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. as shown. and then click to select them. (Rectangle). 45 Using the method learned previously. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring.D.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter Flashing Membrane_F. select the Flashing Membrane group. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. and click OK. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 49 Click Modify. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 52 In the Create Group dialog. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw wide detail lines as shown. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

61 Using the same method. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as shown. press Spacebar twice. 55 Press Esc.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.

and use the grips to resize the masking region. 67 On the Options Bar. select Leader and Free End. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 64 Press Esc twice.62 Press Esc twice. as shown. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down.

select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and click to specify the text insertion point. and click to specify the second leader point. 71 Click Modify. and then click OK. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select 15000 (Division 15 . and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 72 If necessary. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 76 To select the leader start point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 80 Press Esc twice.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 81 Select the text note.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150.70 In the Keynotes dialog.

Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown.

open P103 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 88 In the drawing area. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and click to place it. and then press Esc twice. 90 Press Esc. select the view title. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful